Canon | PowerShot G3 X | User guide | Canon PowerShot G3 X User guide

Canon PowerShot G3 X User guide
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺴﻢ ”ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(١٥‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫● ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪© CANON INC. 2015‬‬
‫‪CEL-SW1FA2N0‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪* *SDHC‬‬
‫‪٢ ١‬‬
‫● ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪* *SDXC‬‬
‫‪٢ ١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺃﻳًّﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪NB-10L‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺮﺑﺎﻁ(‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ )= ‪.(٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪CB-2LC/CB-2LCE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ .SD‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.UHS-I‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Inc.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻮﺯﻋﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﻮﺍ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻱ ﻏﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻨﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪٪٩٩٫٩٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻐﻠﱠﻔﺔ ﺑﻐﻼﻑ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺳﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ ﻟـ ”ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء“ )= ‪.(٤‬‬
‫] [ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ )‪ (٢٠‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫[ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )‪ (٧‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫]‬
‫] [ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ )‪ (١٠‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫] [ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ )‪ (١١‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫] [ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ )‪ (١٨‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫] [ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (١٩‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫] [ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪ (١٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫● ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺳﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫● =‪ :xx‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ “xx” ،‬ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ(‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻤﻼءﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑـ ”ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﺍﻥ ” ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ“ ﻭ”‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ — ﺳﻮﺍء ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫)̀( )˿( )˾(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫)˽˺( )˿( )˼˺()˻˺( )˺˺( )˹˺()̂()́(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫)˼˻(‬
‫)˻˻(‬
‫)˺˻(‬
‫)̀(‬
‫)˿(‬
‫)˾(‬
‫)˽(‬
‫)˼( )˻(‬
‫)́(‬
‫)˽˺(‬
‫)˾˺(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)˼(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˿˺(‬
‫)̀˺(‬
‫)̂(‬
‫)˹˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)́˺(‬
‫)̂˺(‬
‫)˹˻(‬
‫)˺˺(‬
‫)˻˺(‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)˽ (‬
‫)˼˺(‬
‫)˺˻(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫)˾˺()˿˺()̀˺()́˺( )̂˺()˹˻(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫)‪ (١٣‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫)‪ (١٤‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] )ﺭﻓﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ([‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪]:‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ([ ‪/‬‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫]‬
‫)ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ([‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) ]:‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ([ ‪/‬‬
‫]‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ([‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‬
‫)‪ (١٦‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ DIGITAL‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ (١٧‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)‪(٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ HDMITM‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ (١٨‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] )ﻓﻼﺵ([ ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫)‪ (١٧‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)‪(٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ([‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫)‪ (١٨‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ([‬
‫)‪(٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ([‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫)‪ (١٩‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫)‪ (٢٠‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫)‪ (١٥‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫)‪(١٦‬‬
‫)ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪*(N‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ([‬
‫)‪(٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫)‪ (٢١‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫)‪(٨‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)‪ (٢٢‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫)‪ (٢٣‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫)‪ (١٠‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫)‪ (١١‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫)‪ (١٣‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫)‪ (١٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪*(LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫)‪ (١٢‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫)‪ (١٠‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)‪ (١١‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫)‪ (١٤‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ([‬
‫)‪ (١٥‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ([‬
‫)‪] / [(Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪/ [(ISO‬‬
‫[‪]/‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ([‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪] / [(AF‬‬
‫[‬
‫[‬
‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ([‬
‫)‪] (١٩‬‬
‫)ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪/‬ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ([ ‪/‬‬
‫[ ‪(Drive mode)] /‬‬
‫‪(Story‬‬
‫])‪ / Highlights‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫[‬
‫)‪ (٢٠‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪ / [(Macro‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫)‪ (٢١‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ(‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪.(١٣٤ =) NFC‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ٍ‬
‫)= ‪.(١٦٤‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ] [] [] [] [ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٦ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪٢ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ‪٢ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪٢ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ‪٣ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪٣ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪٢٦ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪٢٧ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٢٧ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٢٧ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪٢٧ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٨ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ ‪٢٨ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪٤ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ‪٢٨ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ‪٢٨ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪١٥ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٩ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ‪١٣ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪٣٠ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪٣٠ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪١٨ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٣١ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ‪١٨ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪٣٢ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪١٨ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٩ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٩ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٢٠ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٢٠ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪٢١ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪٢١ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪٢٢ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪٣٢ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ‪٢٣ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪٢٣ ....................................................................(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٢٤ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٢٥ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪٣٣ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪٣٤ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪٣٥ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٣٥ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪٣٥ ....................................................................(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪٣٧ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪٣٨ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٣٨ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪٣٨ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪٣٨ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪٣٩ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪٤٠ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٤٠ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪٤١ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‪٥٥ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪٤١ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪٥٥ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪٥٥ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ‪٥٦ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪٥٦ ......................................................................... IS‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٥٦ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٥٧ .................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ‪٤١ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ )ﺯﻭﻡ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ( ‪٤٢ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﻗﻔﻞ( ‪٤٢ ..........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪٤٣ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪٤٤ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(‪٤٤ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪٤٥ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٤٥ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪٤٦ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ( ‪٤٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪٤٧ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪٤٧ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪٤٨ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪٤٨ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪٤٨ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٤٩ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪٥٠ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‪٥١ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ‪٥٢ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٥٢ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪٥٢ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٥٣ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ ‪٥٣ .................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٥٤ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٥٤ ..................................................................... NTSC‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٥٤ ........................................................................ PAL‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٥٧ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪٥٧ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪٥٧ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٥٨ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٥٨ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٥٨ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ‪٥٩ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( ‪٥٩ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪٦٠ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ )ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ( ‪٦٠ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪٦١ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‪٦٢ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ( ‪٦٢ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ٍ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪٦٣ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ )ﺣﻨﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺿﻲ( ‪٦٣ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ( ‪٦٤ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ( ‪٦٤ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ )ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪٦٥ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ( ‪٦٥ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ )ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‪٦٦ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺲ‪٦٦ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٦٧ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪٦٧ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪٦٧ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ )ﺗﺒﺴﻢ(‪٦٧ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻤﺰ( ‪٦٨ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻪ(‪٦٩ ........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﺮﺻﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ )ﻧﺠﻤﺔ( ‪٧٠ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺳﻤﺎء ﻧﺠﻤﻴﻪ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﻮﻡ( ‪٧٠ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ )ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ(‪٧٠ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ‪٧١ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪٧٣ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ‪٧٤ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪٧٤ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٧٤ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪٧٥ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ‪٧٥ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪٧٦ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٧٦ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ‪٧٦ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻒ ‪٧٦ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ‪٧٦ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪٧٧ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪٧٧ ......................................................................... iFrame‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪٧٨ .................................................................................P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪]) AE‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪٧٨ ...................................................... ([P‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪٧٩ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪٧٩ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٧٩ .............................................. (AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪٧٩ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ AE‬ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ‪٨٠ ..................................................AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٨٠ ..............................................................................ISO‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٨١ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ )‪ NR‬ﻟـ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪٨١ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٨١ ..................................(AEB‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪٨٢ ............................................... (DR‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪٨٣ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ‪٨٣ .......................................................................ND‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٨٣ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ‪٨٣ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪٨٤ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ‪٨٤ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ‪٨٥ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪٨٥ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪٨٦ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )‪٨٦ .............................................................. (Macro‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ‪٨٦ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪٨٧ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ‪٨٨ .............................. (MF‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪٨٨ ..................................................(BKT-‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪٨٩ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٨٩ .............................................................‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪٨٩ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ )‪ AF‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪٨٩ ..........................‬‬
‫‪ +‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪٩٠ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪٩١ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪٩١ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ( ‪٩٢ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ( ‪٩٢ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٩٣ .................................................................... AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٩٣ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٩٣ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٩٣ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪٩٣ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲء ‪٩٤ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪٩٤ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٩٤ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٩٥ .................................................................... FE‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٩٥ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ( ‪١٠٨ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ‪١٠٨ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ‪ ،RGB‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪١٠٨ ...................................... GPS‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪١٠٩ ...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪١٠٩ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪١١٠ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪٩٦ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺮﺷﻴﺤﻬﺎ ‪١١٠ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٩٦ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪٩٦ .....................................................................RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٩٧ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪٩٧ ......................................................................... IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪١١٠ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪١١١ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ‪١١١ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١١٢ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪١١٢ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪١١٣ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪٩٨ ............................................. C2‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻧﻤﻂ ]‪٩٨ ........................................................ ([Tv‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻧﻤﻂ ]‪٩٩ ..................................................... ([Av‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪٩٩ ............................... ([M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪١٠٠ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ‪١١٤ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ‪١١٤ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١١٥ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٠١ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١١٥ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ ‪١١٥ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪١١٥ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٠٢ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ‪١٠٣ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪١٠٣ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١١٦ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ‪١٠١ .................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪١٠٢ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٠٤ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ‪١٠٤ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪١٠٥ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١٠٦ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٠٦ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪١٠٧ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٠٨ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪١١٤ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١١٦ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪١١٧ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ‪١١٧ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪١١٨ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪١١٨ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١١٨ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪١١٩ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪١١٩ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ‪١١٩ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ‪١٢٠ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪١٢٠ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٢٠ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٢٠ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٢١ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ‪١٢١ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٢١ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٢٢ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪١٢٣ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪١٢٣ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪١٢٣ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‪١٢٣ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪١٢٤ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٢٤ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٢٤ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ‪١٢٥ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ‪١٢٦ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪١٢٦ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪١٢٧ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪١٢٨ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪١٢٩ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ‪١٢٩ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪١٢٩ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪١٣٠ .............................................. (Story Highlights‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪١٣٠ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪١٣١ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ‪١٣٢ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪١٣٣ ............................................................... Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ‪١٣٣ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪١٣٤ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪١٣٤ .................................... NFC‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٣٤ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪١٣٦ .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪١٣٦ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٣٨ .................................................. Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪١٣٩ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪١٤٠ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪١٤٠ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪١٤٠ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪١٤٠ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪١٤٠ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪١٤١ .............‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ‪١٤٢ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪١٤٢ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪١٤٢ ............................................... WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪١٤٤ ...........................................WPS‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪١٤٥ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ‪١٤٥ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪١٤٥ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ‪١٤٦ ...................................CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ‪١٤٧ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪١٤٨ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪١٤٩ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪١٥٠ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٥١ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪١٥١ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ‪١٥١ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ‪١٥١ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪١٥٢ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٥٢ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪١٥٣ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪١٥٣ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪١٥٣ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪١٥٣ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٥٣ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪١٥٤ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٥٤ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪١٥٥ .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٥٥ .....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٥٥ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١٥٦ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ‪١٥٧ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪١٦٣ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪١٦٣ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٦٣ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪١٦٣ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ‪١٦٤ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪١٦٤ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ‪١٦٤ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ‪١٦٤ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﻳﺔ ‪١٦٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪١٦٤ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٦٥ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪١٦٥ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪١٦٥ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪١٦٥ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪١٥٧ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪١٥٧ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪١٥٧ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٥٨ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪١٥٨ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪١٦٧ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪١٥٩ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪١٦٨ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪١٥٩ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١٦٨ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٦٨ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪١٦٨ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪١٦٩ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪١٥٩ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪١٥٩ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪١٦٠ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪١٦٠ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪١٦٠ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪١٦١ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪١٦١ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٦١ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪١٦١ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١٦٢ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪١٦٢ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ‪١٦٢ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪١٦٣ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪١٦٦ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٦٩ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪١٦٩ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ‪١٧٠ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪١٧١ .................................................‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ( ‪١٧٢ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ( ‪١٧٢ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪١٧٣ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‪١٧٣ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ( ‪١٧٥ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪١٧٥ ................................................................ Speedlite EX‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ( ‪١٧٦ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪) Speedlite SB-E2‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ‪١٨٧ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ( ‪١٧٦ .................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪١٧٧ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ( ‪١٧٧ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٩١ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪١٧٨ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪١٩٣ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ‪١٧٨ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪١٧٨ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪١٧٨ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪١٧٨ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪١٩٣ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪١٩٣ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ(‪١٩٤ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪١٩٤ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٨٠ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪١٩٥ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ ‪١٨٠ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١٨١ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١٨١ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١٨٢ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪١٨٢ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ ‪١٨٢ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪١٨٣ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪١٨٣ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪١٨٣ ...............................................(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١٨٣ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ‪١٨٤ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٨٤ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٨٤ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١٨٥ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪١٨٥ .................................(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‪١٨٥ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪١٨٥ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪١٨٥ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪١٨٦ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪١٨٦ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٩٥ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪١٩٧ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٠٠ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪٢٠٠ ...................................................................[ 1‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪٢٠١ ...................................................................[ 2‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪٢٠٣ ...................................................................[ 3‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪٢٠٤ ...................................................................[ 4‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪٢٠٥ ...................................................................[ 5‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ]‪٢٠٦ ................................................................... [ 6‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ]‪٢٠٧ ................................................................... [ 7‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪٢٠٨ ...................................................................[ 8‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪٢٠٩ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ“ ‪٢٠٩ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪٢٠٩ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ“ ‪٢١٠ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪١٨٧ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪٢١٠ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪٢١١ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢١١ ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪٢١١ .................................................................................... Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ( ‪٢١١ .........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪٢١٢ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٢١٢ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪٢١٣ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٢١٣ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢١٣ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪٢١٣ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪٢١٤ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٢١٤ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٢١٤ ...............................................................NB-10L‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٢١٤ ..............................................CB-2LC/CB-2LCE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪٢١٥ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‪٢١٧ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪٢١٧ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪٢١٧ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪٢١٨ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ‪٢١٩ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ(‬
‫ = ‪٣٧ = ،٣٥‬‬‫● ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪٦٠ = -‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ‬
‫)= ‪(٦١‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٦٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٦١‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٦١‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺲ‬
‫)= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫‪٩٢ = ،٩٠ = ،٦١ = ،٣٥ = -‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‬
‫)= ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫)= ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﻴﻦ“‬
‫)= ‪(٦٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎء ﻧﺠﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٧٠‬‬
‫● ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ = ‪٣٥‬‬‫● ﻛﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ(‬
‫ = ‪٦٩ = ،٤٥‬‬‫● ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻌًﺎ )ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪٣٨ = -‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫)= ‪(٦٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٠٦ = -‬‬
‫● ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫‪١٣٤ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‬
‫‪١١٥ = -‬‬
‫● ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫‪١٤٥ = -‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪١٦٩ = -‬‬
‫● ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪١٥٣ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪١٧٨ = -‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١١٠ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١١٨ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫● ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪١٣٠ = -‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ = ‪١٠١ = ،٧٤ = ،٣٥‬‬‫● ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪١٠٦ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ = ‪١٨٠‬‬‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫● ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫‪١٧٨ = -‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻔﻪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺒﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻖ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫● ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺑﻠﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ( ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻀﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺒﺼﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺭﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ً‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻬﺐ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻐﺴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﺑﻤﺎء ﻏﺰﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻤﻌﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘ ﱠﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺑﺎﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻘﻄﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻠﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎ ًء ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻤﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﺣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺿﻌﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻄﺎﻣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻄﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫● ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻌﺪﻯ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ؛‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺰﻋﺎﺝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻄﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻜﻚ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺟﺮﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻚ ﺑﺠﺮﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻀﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻃﺊ ﺭﻣﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺘﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻫﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﺎﻥ ‪+‬‬
‫ﻭ– ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺻﻠﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫)˾(‬
‫)˽(‬
‫)˼(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)˻(‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﺒﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﻘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻋﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)˻(‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪CB-2LC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :CB-2LC z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ )‪ (١‬ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪.(٢‬‬
‫‪ :CB-2LCE z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪CB-2LCE‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ )‪ (١‬ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ )‪.(٢‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫● ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ )‪ (١‬ﻭﻷﻋﻠﻰ )‪.(٢‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ )= ‪.(٢١٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ(‬
‫ﻭﻛﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫)‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١٦٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪.(٢١٢‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫)˻(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ )‪ ،(١‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ )‪ (٢‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ )‪.(١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ )‪ (٢‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪ ،(١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )‪.(٢‬‬
‫‪ّ z‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)˻(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )‪ ،(١‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺓ )‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﺘﺒﺮﺯ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺒﻂء‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﺘﺒﺮﺯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪،٢‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ]‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ] [] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﺛﻢ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[ 2‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪(٢١‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻴﻊ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ‪ ،(١٦٨ =،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[ 3‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﺨﻴﻤﻪ‪ّ ،‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ‬
‫] [ ﱠ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ] [ )ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ّ ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ )‪.(١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] []‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )= ‪.(١١٩‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪.(١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ )= ‪.(١٦٢‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪(١٣٣ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )= ‪.(١٧٨‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪) .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)˽(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫)˼(‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)= ‪.(٥٩‬‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ )= ‪.(٦٠‬‬
‫)‪(٧‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،P‬ﻭ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ )= ‪.(٩٨ = ،٧٨‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫)˻(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٣٧ = ،٣٥ = ،٢٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)˾(‬
‫)˿(‬
‫)̀(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪.(١٠١ = ،٧٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٦٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٦١‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ )‪،(٢‬‬
‫ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ )‪ّ ،(١‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )‪.(٣‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)˼(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˽(‬
‫)˾(‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫‪ z‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻟﺨﻔﻀﻬﺎ )‪ ،(٤‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ )‪.(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪1‬‬
‫]ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫[◄‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 1‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ[ )= ‪.(١٠٢‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )= ‪.(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(١٩٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(١٦٥‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪.(١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ )‪ (٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)˻(‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)˻( )˺(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )‪ ،(١‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )] [( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )] [( ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )] [(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[ 1‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ّ z‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(١٦٥‬‬
‫● ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )= ‪.(٢٠٩ = – ٢٠٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫● ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ً‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ً‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ]‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ]‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‬
‫[ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )= ‪ (٤٨‬ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٤٢‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ )‪ (١‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺮ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ] [ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫[‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫] [‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪ (٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )= ‪ (١٧٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )= ‪،٢٧‬‬
‫= ‪(١٦٢ = ،١٦١‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )= ‪ ،(٩٩ = ،٩٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻫﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪.(٤٠ = ،٣٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﺨﻴﻤﻪ‪ّ ،‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ‬
‫] [ ﱠ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ] [ )ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )‪ (١‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﻨﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )‪(.(٢‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ )‪.(١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪ّ ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﺰء ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫● ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(٣٥ =) “(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫● ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪“(Smart Auto‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٣٥‬ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(٣٥ =) “(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ NTSC‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ PAL‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ )= ‪.(١٦٠‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫)= ‪.(١٦٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٦‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺤﻤﻴًﺎ )= ‪(١١٦‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ )= ‪ (٢١‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ )= ‪.(١٦٢‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )= ‪.(١٥٩‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 7‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ ◄‬
‫]ﺑﻼ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪.(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ )= ‪.(١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪ (١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٥٨‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“ )= ‪.(٢١٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪.(٢١٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ] [‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ( )= ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻹﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﻂ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ[ )= ‪.(٥٧‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 8‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ[ ◄ ]ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ )= ‪.(٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﻮﻥ‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫ﻇﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ‬
‫*‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫–‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫*‬
‫–‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫*‬
‫–‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ‬
‫*‬
‫ﺭﺿﻊ ﻣﺒﺘﺴﻤﻮﻥ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺭﺿﻊ ﻧﺎﺋﻤﻮﻥ‬
‫*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﻮﻥ‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻛﺸﺎﻓﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻢ*‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺳﻤﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺳﻤﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﻇﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﺴﻤﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺋﻤﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﺴﻤﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺋﻤﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﺴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪drive mode‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ] [ )= ‪ (٤٧ = ،٤٠‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‬
‫ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٥٣‬‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﺴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﺴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺎﺋﻤﻴﻦ( ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫]ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ )ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻴﻦ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ )ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺛﻨﻰ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻋﺎﻣًﺎ( ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ )= ‪ .(٤٨‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ )= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ )= ‪ (٧٨‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫] [ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ‬
‫)ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ(‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫)ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻧﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻀﻲء ‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻔﻮﺕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‬
‫[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ(*‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪.(Hybrid IS) macro‬‬
‫[ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ )ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫)ﻓﻌّﺎﻟﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻤﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪.(IS‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪ .(٥٦‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.IS‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ( ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻫﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ )ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ )= ‪ (٧٨‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ )‪ (١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪ :‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‬‫)‪.(ZoomPlus‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ :‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )= ‪ ،(٩٦‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫●‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪2‬‬
‫◄ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﻗﻔﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ )ﺯﻭﻡ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻭ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻢ )ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻣﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ ،(٤١‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪،١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ ◄ (٣١‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 7‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.Auto‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻒ )= ‪ (٩٠‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ : Auto‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Auto‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻀﻊ ٍ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٤٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪Auto‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺎﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﺭ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪◄ [ 7‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ[ ◄ ]‬
‫]‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(“ )= ‪ (٤٤‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ[‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻀﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫] [] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ Auto‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫[ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.(٤٣ =) Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ] ‪ :Auto‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(“ )= ‪ ،(٤٣‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(“ )= ‪ (٤٣‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 7‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ[ ◄ ]ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺘﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫)ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٤٥‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪2‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ً‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫● ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ“ )= ‪.(٢١٣‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫●‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ) ‪ ،(١١٨‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٤٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )= ‪ (٣٥‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ[ )= ‪(٥٣‬‬‫ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )= ‪(٥٦‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪ ،(٤٦‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ )= ‪ (١١٣‬ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ )= ‪.(١١٣‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (١١٦‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫)= ‪ .(١١٠‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )= ‪(١١٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )= ‪ (١١٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪ (١٢١‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )= ‪ (١٢٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (١٨٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪ (١٨٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫)= ‪ .(١٨٥‬ﻭﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫)= ‪ (١١٣‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ) ‪ً (١١٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻠﻬﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺒﺮﺯ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪.(١١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺎ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ( ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩ( ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪١٢‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪2‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٥٢‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺒﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻴﻼﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ )= ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻴﻼﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ”ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ“ ﻭ"ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٣٩‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻴﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] []‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻔﻆ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻤﻞء ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺲ )= ‪.(٤٨‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻔﻴﻦ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ،(٥‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻫﺆﻻء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻛﺄﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻛﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻛﺸﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭﺗﺎﺑﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )= ‪.(١١٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻤﻮﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﻫﻬﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ )= ‪.(٤٨‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ“ )= ‪ (١٠٣‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪ ،[ 2‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺴﻄﺔ(‬
‫)= ‪.(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )= ‪ (٤٧‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻊ‪.[.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٤٨‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻊ‪ ،[.‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﺎ ﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻴﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ[‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ“ )= ‪.(٤٨‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ ]ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ[‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﻫﻬﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﻫﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ؛‬
‫ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ً‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻞء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٤٨‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٤٨‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺒﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻣﻞء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ؛ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ؛ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ )= ‪ ،(٥٠‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ )= ‪ (٤٨‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩ( ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٤٨‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﺎ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ )= ‪ (١١٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ )= ‪ (١١٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻪ )= ‪.(١١١‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )= ‪.(١١٤‬‬
‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ١٨٠ x ١٣٠‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ١٣٠ x ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪] ◄ [ 1‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪.(٢١٢‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪(3:2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭﺍ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ ﺑﺼﺒﻐﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 6‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‬
‫)= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ ٤٢٠) A2‬ﻣﻢ ‪ ٥٩٤ x‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ ٢١٠ x ١٤٨ − ٤٢٠ x ٢٩٧) A3 – A5‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪ ١٣٠ x ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‪ ١٨٠ x ١٣٠ ،‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪] ◄ [ 1‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺯﺋﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )= ‪ ،(٤٧‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪PAL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(١٦٠ =) PAL‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪.(٢١٣‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ً ٥٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ً ٢٥‬‬
‫‪1280 x 720‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ً ٢٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(HD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ً ٢٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫● ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء )ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ]‬
‫ﻭ]‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻭ]‬
‫[( ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪] ◄ [ 8‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪NTSC‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫‪1280 x 720‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ً ٥٩٫٩٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ً ٢٩٫٩٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ً ٢٣٫٩٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ً ٢٩٫٩٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ً ٢٩٫٩٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫]‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻼﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(HD‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﻜﺒﱢﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪2‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪[AF‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﻛﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،١‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 1‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﺤﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺍ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ )= ‪.(١٦١‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ً‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪(٤١‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ )= ‪(١٦٩‬‬‫● ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻷﻋﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪7‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪4‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﺎ ﺑﺄﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﺣﻔﻆ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ )= ‪.(٥٨‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ )= ‪.(٤٠‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )= ‪.(٤٧‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[IS‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ ،[IS‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ( )= ‪.(٤٠‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ“ )= ‪(٥٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[IS‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﻂ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[ )‪ (NTSC‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‬
‫[ )‪.(PAL‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪[AF-‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪5‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ ،[.‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺳﺮﻳﻊ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ 4 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﺣﻔﻆ[ )= ‪.(٥٨‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(١٩٤‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ )= ‪ (٥٨‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺳﺮﻳﻊ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺙ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )= ‪.(١١٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫● ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ )ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺤﺒﺐ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (٨٠ =) ISO‬ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“‬
‫)= ‪.(٢١٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺠﻴﺔ )ﺛﻠﺞ(‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﻃﻮﻟﻲ(‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫)ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺤﺒﺐ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (٨٠ =) ISO‬ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫[ ً‬
‫]‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ )= ‪.(٣٥‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 1‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 1‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ٍ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ )ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٦٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﻮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٦٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻲ ﺣﻴﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻲ ﺇﻳﺤﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺰﺧﺮﻑ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٦٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺘﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ ﻭﺗﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺘﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ )ﺣﻨﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺿﻲ(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ )= ‪.(١٠٦‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٦٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻑ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٦٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ُﻋﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ )ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻭﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ( ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٦٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ً ٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻲ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ .(٥٢‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ،٣‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﺌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺲ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ )ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٦٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺮﺹ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ّ ،‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٦٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ )ﺗﺒﺴﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٦٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺒﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٦١‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺴﻤًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺒﺴﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫● ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻓﻤﻬﻢ ﺑﻮﺳﻊ ٍ‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )= ‪ (٥٦‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻤﺰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻤﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٦١‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻤﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٦١‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻏﻤﺰ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﺑﺘﺄﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻏﻤﺰ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺒﻂء‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ ﻣﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻐﻤﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )= ‪ (٥٦‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻗﻴﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٦١‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪ .(٩٠‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٦١‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻀﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪) .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ‪ (.‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻀﻤﺎﻣﻚ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )= ‪ (٥٦‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٦١‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﺮﺻﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ )ﻧﺠﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺳﻤﺎء ﻧﺠﻤﻴﻪ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﻮﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٦١‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٦١‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ )ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 2‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻠﻲ[ ◄ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪ (١٦١‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫● ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪◄ [ 5‬‬
‫]ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ[ ◄ ]ﺣﺎﺩ[‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺳﻠﺲ[‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺬﻫﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )= ‪ (٨٦‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٦١‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ[ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻ ُﺗ ْﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﺷﻜﺖ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 2‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻠﻲ[ ◄ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪ (١٦١‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )= ‪ (٨٦‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٦١‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻭﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٦١‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )= ‪ (١٠٦‬ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ ٨‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ ٨‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ[ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻ ُﺗ ْﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪ (١٦١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ٣٠ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ١ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫)‪(NTSC‬‬
‫)‪(PAL‬‬
‫‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ٩٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ١٢٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪PAL‬‬
‫‪NTSC‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﺷﻜﺖ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﻼء‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ[ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ [ ] :‬ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪◄ [ 2‬‬
‫]ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ[ ◄ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪ (١٦١‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 5‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 5‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ [ ◄ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ )= ‪ ،(١١٨‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )= ‪ (٨٦‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫)ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،(١٦٨ = ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٦١‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ )= ‪ (٧٠‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٧١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٧٠‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ،A‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫● ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(٨٤ =) ٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(٨٤ =) ٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ] [ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 1‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪) .‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪(.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )= ‪.(١٩٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ] [ )ﻭﻣﻴﺾ(‪ :‬ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ ] [‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪،(١٦:٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ]‬
‫[ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪،(٤:٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻫﻲ ]‪.[AUTO‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﻂ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[ )= ‪ ،(٥٧‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎءﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ٣/١‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ −3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+3‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٧٤‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴّﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ )= ‪ (٥٧‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﻂ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[ )‪ (NTSC‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‬
‫[ )‪.(PAL‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ[ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ )= ‪.(٧٦‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪/‬ﻣﺨﻔﻒ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻀﻊ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.(١٣٠ =) Story Highlights‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻳﺪﻭﻱ[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪/‬ﻣﺨﻔﻒ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺨﻔﻒ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪8‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ[ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ )= ‪.(٧٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻒ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ٍ ٦ – ٤‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )= ‪.(٧٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٧٤‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪2x‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻠﻪ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1x‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1/2x‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻠﻪ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻋﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫[ )ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪ (NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻲ ]‬
‫= ‪ (٥٤‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ )ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪،٥٤ =) (PAL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪iFrame‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.iFrame‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٧٤‬‬
‫● ‪ iFrame‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬
‫[ )ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪ (NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻲ ]‬
‫[ )ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪،٥٤ =) (PAL‬‬
‫= ‪ (٥٤‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪]) AE‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪([P‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ )= ‪– ٧٩‬‬
‫= ‪ ،(٩٧‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫● ] [‪ :‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪AE‬؛ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ )= ‪.(١٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (٨٠ =) ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪ ،(٩٣ = ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (٣٠‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫● ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[ )ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ٣/١‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+3‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ ‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،AE‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻛﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺿﻤﻦ ] [ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ .(AE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ AE‬ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ‪.(٨٠ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ AE‬ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ“ )= ‪(٧٩‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪[AE‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪[AF‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪6‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ AE‬ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٨٩‬‬
‫‪200 ،160 ،125‬‬
‫‪800 ،640 ،500 ،400 ،320 ،250‬‬
‫‪،3200 ،2500 ،2000 ،1600 ،1250 ،1000‬‬
‫‪6400 ،5000 ،4000‬‬
‫‪12800 ،10000 ،8000‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻐﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ‪+‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ[ )= ‪.(٩٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 5‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪] ◄ [ISO‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.[ISO‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ )‪ NR‬ﻟـ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ]‪ ،[12800] – [400‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪5‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪6‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ NR‬ﻟـ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪[ISO‬‬
‫[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻝ[‪] ،‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ[‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ‪] :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[‪ٍ ،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.(٩٦ =) RAW‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ[ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻣﻦ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ +2‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ٣/١‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪4‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪(DR‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ AEB‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ )= ‪.(٩٣‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )= ‪ (٤٧‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ )= ‪ ،(٧٩‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٧٩‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ] [ )= ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )= ‪ ،(٥٦‬ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ )= ‪(٨٠‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫]‪[12800] – [125] ،[AUTO‬‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪٪٢٠٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ] [‪.‬‬
‫]‪[6400] – [250] ،[AUTO‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (٨٠ =) ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ ،(WB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ‪ND‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ‪ ،ND‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٨/١‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ )ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ ٣‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫● ‪ :ND‬ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻐﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Tungsten‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻫﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fluorescent‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Fluorescent H‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(٨٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(“ )= ‪ (٨٣‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ؛ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(“ )= ‪ (٨٣‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫‪ B‬ﻭ‪.A‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫[ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ””ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(“‬
‫)= ‪ ،((٨٣‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫] [] [] [] [‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ؛ ‪ :A‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ؛ ‪ :M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ؛ ‪ :G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ] [ )= ‪.(١٠٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٧‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻳﺮﺩ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪] ◄ [ 6‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫● ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻟﻄﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺜﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻏﺎﻣﻖ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻤﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪.٥ – ١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )= ‪ (٨٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ] [ ﻭ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ )= ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(“ )= ‪ (٨٥‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻗﻮﻯ‪/‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ )ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺿﻌﻒ‪/‬ﺃﻓﺘﺢ )ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )‪(Macro‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،AF‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪.(٢١٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪.(٢١٣‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫● ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(٤٥‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪.MF‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ MF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)‪ ،١‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ( ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ )ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ )= ‪(٨٩‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻋﺎﺩﻱ[‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫]‪ AF‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ[ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪(٨٩ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ (٤١‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫)= ‪ (٨٩‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ )= ‪ ،(١٦٩‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎءﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(٣١ =) MENU‬‬
‫◄ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ◄ [ 4‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪ -MF‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 4‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻦ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴّﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [AF+MF‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ] [‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪MF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ( ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ] [ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ‪(MF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ( ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ‪ [MF‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 4‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ )= ‪.(٩٣‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )= ‪ (٤٧‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ“ )= ‪.(٨٦‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ] [ )= ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )= ‪ ،(٥٦‬ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ‪ MF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪(BKT-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪4‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 1.6x‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2.0x‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(“ )= ‪.(٤١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪[AF‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٥٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪ AF‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛﻮﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪.(٩٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ )‪ AF‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 3‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫[] [ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ] [‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ (٤١‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ (٨٩‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )= ‪.(٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ AE‬ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ‪.(٨٠ =) AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪[AF‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٣١ =) [ 3‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )] [ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪ +‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫● ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪.(٥٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ ]‬‫[‪ً ٣١ :‬‬
‫ ]‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ‬
‫[‪ً ٢٥ :‬‬
‫ ]‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ‬
‫[‪ً ٢١ :‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )= ‪ ،(٩١‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻲء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﺄﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫]‪.[SERVO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )= ‪ (٤٧‬ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪.AF‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٣١ =) [ 2‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )= ‪ ،(٤٧‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ AF‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪3‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺎﺋﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ”ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ‪+‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ[‬
‫)= ‪.(٨٩‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )= ‪.(٤٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫] [ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﻛﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ]‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ً‬
‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ”ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ‪+‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ[‬
‫)= ‪.(٨٩‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺒﺎﻳ ًﻨﺎ ﻛﺎﻓﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ )= ‪ ،(٨٦‬ﻓﺴﺘﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )= ‪ .(٤٨‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“ )= ‪.(٢١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫[ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪.MF‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ AF‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﺑﻄﺊ ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪ ،(٧٩‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ +2‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ٣/١‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻭﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪◄ [ 5‬‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ◄ ]ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪] ◄ [FE‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٣١‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ◄ ]ﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ[ )= ‪ (٣١‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ[ )= ‪ (٣١‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،(٧٩ =) AE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(٩٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ FE‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ FE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫[؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،FE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪5‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﻦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﻢ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ( ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .(٩٦ =) RAW‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪.(٢١٢‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٥٣‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻠﻬﺎ؛ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ”ﺧﺎﻡ“ )ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ )‪،Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫= ‪ (١٧٨‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TIFF‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺪﺍ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ] [ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ] [ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﻦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ]‪.[RAW‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺯﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ]‪.[RAW‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪) RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ )= ‪.(١٧٨‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ (٤١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ )= ‪ (٨١‬ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )= ‪ (٨٢‬ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ )= ‪ (٨٣‬ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )= ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪.(٢١٢‬‬
‫● ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻫﻮ ‪ .JPG‬ﻭﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻮ ‪.CR2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪1‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪ .[RAW‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[−‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]‪ ،[JPEG‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[−‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻭ]‪ [JPEG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [−‬ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٥٦‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻧﻤﻂ ]‪([Tv‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ“ )= ‪.(٢١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺫﻛﺎ ًء ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﻘﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ )= ‪(٨٠‬‬
‫]‪[3200] – [125] ،[AUTO‬‬
‫‪1 – 1/2000‬‬
‫]‪[12800] – [125] ،[AUTO‬‬
‫‪1.3 – 30‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫● ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ )= ‪.(٩٩‬‬
‫● ]‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪([M‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻧﻤﻂ ]‪([Av‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ“ )= ‪.(٢١٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٢١٤‬ﻭ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ“ )= ‪.(٢١٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )‪.(١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،(٣) ISO‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫)˼(‬
‫)˻( )˺(‬
‫)˽(‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫● ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 6‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪ (٣١‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫)˾(‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )‪ً ،(٥‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )‪.(٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﻋﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[AUTO‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺗﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ )= ‪(٨١‬‬
‫]‪1.3 – 30 ،[BULB‬‬
‫]‪[3200] – [125] ،[AUTO‬‬
‫‪1 – 1/2000‬‬
‫]‪[12800] – [125] ،[AUTO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ] [‪ :‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٧٩‬‬
‫● ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[AUTO‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[BULB‬ﻣﺘﺒﻌًﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ٣ – ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ”ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ] [(“ )= ‪.(٩٩‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺯﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ )= ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )= ‪ (١٥٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ )= ‪.(١٧٢‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪5‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] []‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] []‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻳﺪﻭﻱ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻭﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪] ،‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪] ،‬‬
‫]‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ◄ ]ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ )= ‪ (٣١‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪ (٣١‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٢١٤‬ﻭ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ“ )= ‪ (٢١٤‬ﻭ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(٨٠ =) “ISO‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻤﻮﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ ،LED‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﻋﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٣‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫● ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ] [ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ] [ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 1‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ[ ◄ ]ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺛﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫● ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٠٢‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ [1‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ،[2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪1‬‬
‫]ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ[ ◄ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ]‪ [2.35:1‬ﻭ]‪ [1.85:1‬ﻭ]‪[1.75:1‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪ [1.66:1‬ﻭ]‪ .[4:3‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻲ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪2‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫[◄‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫] []‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] []‬
‫[(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ ] []‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ً‬
‫[ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ] ‪ ،[ /‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫[ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ]‬
‫] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑـ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ AF‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ[ )= ‪.(٨٩ = ،٨٩‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )= ‪ (٨٤‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﱟ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬‫ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﻀﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﺭﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )] [ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫[(‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ )= ‪(٩٩ = – ٧٩‬‬
‫● ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫● ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫● ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )= ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫● ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )= ‪(١٠٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪2‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ .٣‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻠﻪ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[ )= ‪.(١٦٥‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪1‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [ 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٥‬‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫● ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ[ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻓﺮﺯ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻉ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪1‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻓﺮﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻭﺗﺼﻔﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٦‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛‬
‫ﻭﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] []‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫[‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(١٠٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪ (١‬ﻣﺨﻔﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] []‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪5‬‬
‫[ ◄ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪5‬‬
‫[ ◄ ]ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ[ ◄ ]ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪5‬‬
‫[ ◄ ]ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫] [] [ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ "ﺻﻔﺮ"‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )= ‪.(١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪.(١٩٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ )= ‪.(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ‪ ،RGB‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (١٠٨‬ﻫﻮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)= ‪.(١٩٣ = ،١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ‪ ،RGB‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ‪ RGB‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪ R‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،B‬ﻭﻳﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﱢ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪،Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪ .(١٥٥‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.GPS‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪) (UTC‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ً [---‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ‬
‫● ‪) Coordinated Universal Time :UTC‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﻨﺘﺶ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫● ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺘﻘﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ GPS‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٣٧‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )= ‪.(١٠٨‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫]ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﺎ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫]‪2‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺮﺷﻴﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺴﻄﺔ )= ‪ ،(١٠٨‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻔﻴﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )= ‪.(٤٨‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪3‬‬
‫[ ◄ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[ ◄‬
‫]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪5‬‬
‫[ ◄ ]ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺏ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻛﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (١١٦‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ )= ‪ (١١٨‬ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪.(١٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(٣٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ )= ‪.(٤٨‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ] [ ﻛﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺜﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫● ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪” (٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ“ )= ‪ ،(١١٠‬ﻭ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ ،(١١٥‬ﻭ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ“ )= ‪.(١١٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ (١١٦‬ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ“ )= ‪ (١١٩‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪ (١٨٣ =) “(DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٨٥‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )= ‪ ،(١٢٩ = – ١٢٤‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪.٢‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺤﺎﻻﺗﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻻﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪.(١٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻰ ‪ 100‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻲ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪،‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‬
‫”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪(١١٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫[ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ )= ‪ (٦٠ = ،٤٧‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٥٩‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ )= ‪ (٧١‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑـ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،(٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ“ )= ‪ (١١٠‬ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ .(١١٥‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ (١١٦‬ﺃﻭ ]ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ“ )= ‪ (١١٩‬ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (١٨٣ =) “(DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٨٥‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ ◄ (٣١‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪5‬‬
‫[ ◄ ]ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪ .(٣١‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ”ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪ (٥٩‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪.٢‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪3‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ“ )= ‪ ،(١١٠‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٥١‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١١٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻀﺨﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 10x‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫[ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )‪(١‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ]‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ[‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫] [] [] [] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫] [ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‬
‫]ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ٍ‬
‫ﺑﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪ (٢٧‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫َﺮﺿﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ )= ‪.(١١٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌ َ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ .[OFF‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪.(١٦٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪1‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١١٦‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١١٦‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﺂﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ )= ‪.(١١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻓﺘﺢ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻭ ‪.٣‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴّﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١١٦‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ”ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ"‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪١١٨‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﻦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ [ ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪.(١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ )= ‪.(١١٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١١٩‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪1‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ"‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ )= ‪.[ ] (١١٧‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﻦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١١٩‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ“ )= ‪ (١١٧‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(١٢١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١١٩‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪1‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫● ”ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )= ‪” ،(١٠٦‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ“ )= ‪” ،(١١٥‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪،(١١٦‬‬
‫”ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪” ،(١١٨‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪” ،(١٨٣ =) “(DPOF‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ“ )= ‪(١٨٥‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ّ ،‬‬
‫]‪ ،[OFF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪5‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪1‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ (١٢٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺴﺎﻫﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ )= ‪.(١٣٠‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﻧﺠﻮﻡ )‬
‫( ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 8‬ﺃﻭ ‪) .Windows 7‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪(.RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪.(١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺧﺼﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪6‬‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟـ ]‬
‫[ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟـ ]‬
‫ﻭ] [‪ ،‬ﻭ] [ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻤﺴﻴﺔ )ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪.(١٣٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )= ‪ (١٢٧ = – ١٢٤‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ً‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫[ ً‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‪ ،‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪3‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٢٤‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(١٢٤‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٢٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪3‬‬
‫[ ◄ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )= ‪ ،(٤٨‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺬﺑﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺤﺒﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻢ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﻓﺮﺩﻫﻤﺎ )= ‪ (١١٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(“ )= ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪3‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )= ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ( ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺌﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪3‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٢٤‬‬
‫● ﺳﺘﻘﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٢٤‬‬
‫‪١٢٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺤﺒﺐ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٢٤‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ٍ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ] [] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪3‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١١٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.(٣٧ = ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢٨‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺿﻐﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ] [‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ] [‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺺ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﻣﻦ ] [( ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺺ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫[]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١) z‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭ)‪ (٢‬ﻫﻮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )= ‪،(١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﻓﻲ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻗﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻘﻂ ً‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺬﺕ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ‪.(١٦٨ = ،‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ"‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫] [ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ]‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ]‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴّﻦ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(“ )= ‪ ،(١٠٩‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ( )= ‪ (٣٧‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪(Story Highlights‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪(١٢١‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﻬﺮﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺼﻮﺭﻫﻢ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﻫﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻄﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻋﻴﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ[ ﻛﺴﻤﺔ ﻟﻸﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ[ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ٍ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] []‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻛﻔﻴﻠﻢ[‪،‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ )= ‪.(١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻧﺼﻒ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺳﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(٣٧‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )= ‪(٧٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ[ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪،Story Highlights‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ٤ – ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪Story‬‬
‫‪ ،(١٣٠ =) “(Highlights‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ٣ – ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪Story‬‬
‫‪ (١٣٠ =) “(Highlights‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪Story‬‬
‫‪ (١٣٠ =) “(Highlights‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ )= ‪.(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ [BGM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻻ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]ﺧﺎﻟﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ BGM‬ﻓﻘﻂ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫● ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ]ﻣﺴﺎﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ [BGM‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ٣ – ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪Story‬‬
‫‪ ،(١٣٠ =) “(Highlights‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺨﺼﺺ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺨﺺ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻸﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺨﺺ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﺠﺪ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ[‪ .‬ﺃﺿﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴّﻦ ﻓﻲ‬
‫”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ“ )= ‪ (١٣١‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪ ،(١٣٠ =) “(Story Highlights‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪“(Story Highlights‬‬
‫)= ‪ (١٣٠‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ؟[‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪١٥‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻻ ”ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫● ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺩﻋﻢ ‪(DPS over IP‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪(١٣٤ =) NFC‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Android‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪) NFC‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ OS‬ﻫﻮ ‪4.0‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬
‫● ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ] [ )= ‪(١٣٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ .(١٣٦‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(١٣٨ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ )ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤُﻀﻤﱠﻨﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪NFC‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ NFC‬ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪) Android‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ OS‬ﻫﻮ ‪ 4.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ( ﻟﺘﻴﺴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ً NFC‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ“ )= ‪ .((١٥٥‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺂﺧﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ NFC‬ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺛﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫‪ّ z‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻼﻣﺴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ( ) N‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Google Play‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Camera‬‬
‫‪ ،Connect‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ( ) N‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬٍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ ،NFC‬ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻀﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬‫ﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﻙ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻣًﺎ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٣‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻻ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(١٥٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(١٣٤ =) ٢‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ .( ) N‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(١٥١‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ ،NFC‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪◄ [ 4‬‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi] ◄ [NFC‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Camera‬‬
‫‪ (١٣٤ =) Connect‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ N‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬٍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٦‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ (١٣٤ =) “NFC‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(١٥١‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )= ‪.(١٣٩‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،iPad‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ Camera Connect‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ‪ App Store‬ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Android‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻓﻲ ‪Google Play‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺛﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪SSID‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(١٣٦ =) ٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪◄ [ 4‬‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ[ ◄ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 4‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ .( ) N‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )= ‪.(١٣٩‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺛﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،iPad‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ Camera Connect‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ‪ App Store‬ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Android‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻓﻲ ‪Google Play‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬٍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ )= ‪.(١٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٣٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫] [‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٥‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻻ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(١٥٧‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 4‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(١٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ[ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ“ )= ‪ (١٣٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪.(١٣٨‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪.(١٤٢ =) “WPS‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ (١٤٤ =) “WPS‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﻭ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ (١٣٨ =) “Wi-Fi‬ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ“ )= ‪ (١٣٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.(١٣٨ =) “Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ُﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ“‬
‫)= ‪.(١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ“ )= ‪ (١٣٩‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺄﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪Windows 8/8.1‬‬
‫● ‪Windows 7 SP1‬‬
‫● ‪Mac OS X 10.9‬‬
‫● ‪ Mac OS X 10.8.2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﻳﻦ ‪ Windows 7 Starter‬ﻭ‪.Home Basic‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) Windows 7 N‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ( ﻭ‪) KN‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ( ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ Windows Media Feature Pack‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.8‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪.http://www.canon.com/icpd/‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻠﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Easy Installation‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﻬﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Restart‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ ISP‬ﻭﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ :Windows‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[ ◄ ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ[ ◄ ]‪ ،[Canon Utilities‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ :Mac OS‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ]‪ [Canon Utilities‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ]‪ ،[Applications‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ‬‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻏﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[ ◄ ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ[ ◄‬
‫]‪◄ [CameraWindow] ◄ [Canon Utilities‬‬
‫]‪/Wi-Fi connection setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Windows‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ )ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ( ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ )ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ( ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪.(ICMP‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪.(UPnP‬‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﻨﻌﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”‪.(١٤٢ =) “Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬‬
‫)‪ (١٤٢ = WPS‬ﺃﻡ ﻻ )= ‪ .(١٤٤‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )‪(SSID/ESSID‬‬
‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ESSID‬ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗُﻌﺮﻑ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑـ ”ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ“ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫”ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ"‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ /‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪WPA2-PSK :‬‬
‫)‪ (AES‬ﺃﻭ )‪ WPA2-PSK (TKIP‬ﺃﻭ )‪ WPA-PSK (AES‬ﺃﻭ )‪ WPA-PSK (TKIP‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) WEP‬ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ /‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ“ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ"‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ WEP‬ﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ”‪ “١‬ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٤٢‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪ WPS‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ )‪ (LAN‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪ MAC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 4‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪◄ [Wi-Fi‬‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪.[MAC‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪WPS‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ‪ WPS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪.WPS‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫”ﺍﺑﺪﺃ“ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.[WPS‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ،[WPS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪.[PBC‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،[PBC‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ WPS‬ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ٍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٣‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ :Windows z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Downloads‬‬
‫‪/Images From Canon Camera‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.[Canon‬‬
‫‪ :Mac OS z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ [OK/‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ً‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎ ً‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٤٤‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 4‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(١٤٢ =) ٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Mac OS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Dock‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ [PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٦‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪WPS‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.(١٤٢ =) “WPS‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ )= ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٨‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪“WPS‬‬
‫)= ‪.(١٤٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٦‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]*[‬
‫ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٣‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪.(١٤٢ =) “WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫● ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٨‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.(١٤٢ =) “WPS‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٤٥‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ (١٤٢ =) “WPS‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ (١٤٤ =) “WPS‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ )‪ ،Microsoft Internet Explorer‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ )‪.(http://www.canon.com/cig/‬‬
‫● ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺑًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻔﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪ (ISP‬ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗُ َ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٤٦‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪ http://www.canon.com/cig/‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﻦ ﺑﻚ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻀﻮ )ﻣﺠﺎ ًﻧﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٧‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٦‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٧‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪“WPS‬‬
‫)= ‪ (١٤٢‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.(١٤٤ =) “WPS‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑـ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٧‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻭﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪) ٦‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٤٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [ )= ‪ (١٥٣‬ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻛﻮﺟﻬﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫]‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ“‬
‫)= ‪.(١٤٧‬‬
‫● ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(١٤٦ =) ٣‬‬
‫● ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ (١٤٦ =) “GATEWAY‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ )= ‪.(١٤٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻢ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،YouTube‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺃﻭﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٤٨‬‬
‫● ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(١٥١‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Canon Online Photo Album app‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Canon Online Photo Album‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ iPhones‬ﺃﻭ ‪ iPads‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪ App Store‬ﺃﻭ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Android‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪.Google Play‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )= ‪.(١٣٩‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪.(١٣٨‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) SSID‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪.(١٨٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] []‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 4‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ“‬
‫)= ‪.(١٣٩‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﱠﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‪.‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪.(١٣٨‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٠‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 4‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(١٥٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ]‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ“ )= ‪،(١٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٥١‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] []‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻊ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺤﺪﺩ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫[]‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ“ )= ‪ (١١٧‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٥١‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ .(٤ =) Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫● ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻴﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻬﺎ )= ‪ ،(١٢٩‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻭﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪.(١٢١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،١‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ[ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] []‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫● ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]ﻻ[ ﻛﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪◄ [ 4‬‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫] [] [] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻒ ً‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎ )= ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ] [ ﻛﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪.iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [ ﻛﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺿﻒ ] [ ﻛﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪.(١٤٦ =) “CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻛﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ (١٤٥ =) CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪.iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٣١ =) [ 4‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [(‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺰﺭ )= ‪.(١٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫)= ‪.(١٤٠‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Windows z‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Add new camera‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ :Mac OS z‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Add new camera‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ .iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٤‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ .CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ]‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪،‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ] [‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ“ )= ‪.(١٤٨‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ‪.(١٦٨ = ،‬‬
‫● ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ )‪ ،Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“ )= ‪.(١٥٤‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Canon Online Photo Album‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ iPhones‬ﺃﻭ ‪iPads‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪ App Store‬ﺃﻭ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Android‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪.Google Play‬‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،(١٤٥ =) CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫● ّ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪.GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٥‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ ،Canon Online Photo Album‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪.Canon Online Photo Album‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫● ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪(١٥٥‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )= ‪(١٥٦‬‬
‫● ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ ﻹﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫)= ‪.(١٥٧ = ،١٣٨ =،١٣٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Camera‬‬
‫‪ Connect‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪ .(٢١‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٦٢‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﻛﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫[ ﻭ] [‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻭ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ MENU‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )= ‪.(١٣٨ = ،١٣٦‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻌﻮﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٦‬‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻬﺎ ًﺯﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫– ‪ :‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٥٧‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ[ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫)= ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫]ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ[ )= ‪(١٥٧‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[ )= ‪(١٣٦‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ[ )= ‪(١٥٧‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪ : O‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٥٧‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ( ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٣١ =) [ 4‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻴّﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٣٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٨‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٣١ =) [ 4‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ً Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﻳ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ (Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(١٦٥ =) [ 4‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [ 1‬ﻭ]‪ [ 2‬ﻭ]‪ [ 3‬ﻭ]‪.[ 4‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﻳﻮﻣﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )‪ (9999 – 0001‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢،٠٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 9999‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ(‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0001‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫● ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪،0001‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.(١٦٠ = ،‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪١٦٠‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪(١٦٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪ ،(١٦٠‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻷﻱ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﻄﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪ ،(١٦٠‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫]ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ[‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﻬﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﻌﻠﻦ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺍ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ )= ‪ (١٠٢‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٦١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍء ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺜﻞ‪.(٧٠ =) [ ] ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺧﻔﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(١٩٣‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺸﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻭ]‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪ (١٦١‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 2‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(١٩٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﻦ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ] ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ[ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٦٢‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ (.[ 2‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٢١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫● ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﺪﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪ .(٢٦‬ﻭﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٣‬‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪ (١٠٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫[]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٣٧‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[ft/fn‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )= ‪ ،(٣٥‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪،(٨٦ =) MF‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﻡ‪/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﺴﺎﺱ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 4‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )= ‪ .(٣٠‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺓ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 4‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 4‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ )= ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٦٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [ 4‬ﻫﻮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(١٣٣ =) [Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [ 4‬ﻫﻮ ]ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ[ )= ‪(١٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[ 4‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ (١٦٥‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )= ‪(٤٨‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [ 1‬ﻫﻮ ]ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ )= ‪(١٦٠‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [ 2‬ﻫﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ[ )= ‪ (١٦٢‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‬‫)= ‪ ،(١٦٣‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [ 3‬ﻫﻮ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫[ )= ‪(١٦٣‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ )= ‪(٨٤‬‬‫ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ]‬‫[ )= ‪ (٦١‬ﻭ] [ )= ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٧٩‬‬‫ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(٧٤‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(١٣٣ =) Wi-Fi‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )= ‪(١٦١‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ )= ‪(١٦٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﺤﻖ ﻟﻚ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٦٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪*CB-2LC/CB-2LCE‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪*Speedlite‬‬
‫‪،580EX II ،600EX ،600EX-RT‬‬
‫‪270EX II ،320EX ،430EX II‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪*NB-10L‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) USB‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪*(Mini-B :‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪Canon‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٦٧‬ﻣﻢ(*‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪/LH-DC100‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ‪FA-DC67B‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‬
‫‪RS-60E3‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫‪EVF-DC1‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪HTC-100‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫‪ACK-DC80‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٦٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪.(IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ Speedlite 580EX :‬ﻭ‪ 430EX‬ﻭ‪ 270EX‬ﻭ‪ 220EX‬ﻭ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫‪ Transmitter ST-E2‬ﻭ‪ ST-E3-RT‬ﻭ‪ Speedlite Bracket SB-E2‬ﻭ‪Off-Camera Shoe‬‬
‫‪.Cord OC-E3‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ‪.FA-DC67B‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪Speedlite 600EX-RT/600EX/‬‬
‫‪580EX II/430EX II/320EX/270EX II‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺣﺬﺍء ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ‪ Speedlite 580EX‬ﻭ‪ 430EX‬ﻭ‪270EX‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ 220EX‬ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-10L‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite SB-E2‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LC/CB-2LCE‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ‪Off-Camera Shoe‬‬
‫‪.Cord OC-E3‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-10L‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪AC ACK-DC80‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2، ST-E3-RT‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪.(Speedlite 220EX/270EX‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI HTC-100‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﺪﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ‪RS-60E3‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﱢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪/LH-DC100‬ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫‪FA-DC67B‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻮﻫﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ٦٧‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪) Canon‬ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٦٧‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٦٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) HDMI HTC-100‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ]‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ٍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٧٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )= ‪.(١٩٤‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ (٥٥ =) AF‬ﻭ‪ -MF‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬
‫)= ‪ (٨٦‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ‪ (٨٨ =) MF‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ )= ‪ (١٦١‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC ACK-DC80‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﺷﻴﺌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٢٠‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫)˻(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )‪ ،(١‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺓ )‪.(٢‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ،FA-DC67B‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) LH-DC100‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪١٧١‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٦٧‬ﻣﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ]ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺁﻣﻦ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎء ٍ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪/LH-DC100‬ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ‪ FA-DC67B‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ،FA-DC67B‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ّ z‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴّﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(“‬
‫)= ‪.(١٧١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ (٢‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )‪ ،(١‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪ RS-60E3‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ )‪ ،(٣‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫)˼(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫‪١٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺎ )ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ (٢‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )‪ ،(١‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٧٣‬‬
‫● ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺼﻄﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ )= ‪.(٢١٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭ ّﻛﺐ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ّ z‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫)= ‪ (١٧٣‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٧٤‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [UNLOCK‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٪٩٩٫٩٩‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪ (٥٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‬
‫ﺑﻤﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ◄‬
‫]ﻳﺪﻭﻱ[‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﺑﻤﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻼﺳﺔ )ﺳﻮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻌﻤﺮ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ‪◄ (٣١ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [ 1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ◄ ]ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ (١٣٣ =) Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪ (٣٢‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪Story Highlights‬‬
‫)= ‪.(١٣٠‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )= ‪ (١٦٢‬ﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٧٥‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﻘﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ .Speedlite EX‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪ً Speedlite 320EX‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪.LED‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﺒﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ )= ‪.(١٧٦‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪Speedlite EX‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ Speedlite EX‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪5‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪.Speedlite EX‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻴﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪) Canon‬ﻭﺑﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪Speedlite EX‬‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ 600EX-RT/580EX II‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺳﺘﺮﻭﺑﻮﺳﻜﻮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 320EX‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ LED‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪) Speedlite SB-E2‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite Bracket‬‬
‫‪ SB-E2‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻦ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫*‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫*‪٧‬‬
‫*‪٨‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ [.‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪) .‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‪ (.‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ )= ‪.(١٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ*‬
‫‪ –3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+3‬‬
‫‪ ٥*١٢٨/١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ١/١‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣/١‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ‪/1‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ‪/2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ*‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ*‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ*‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪*FE‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ*‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١٧٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ E-TTL‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ M‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ً E-TTL‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[+0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 600EX-RT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 600EX‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 580EX II‬ﺃﻭ ‪430EX II‬‬
‫‪ ،Speedlites‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻳﺪﻭﻱ[‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦٤/١‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ ‪.Speedlite 430EX II/430EX/320EX/270EX II/270EX‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪580EX II/600EX-‬‬
‫‪ .RT/600EX/90EX‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ‪.[2‬‬
‫)ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ‪ ،[2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ‪(.[1‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻱ ]ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪[FE‬‬
‫ﻭ]ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ [.‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [ 4‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١٦٥‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ( ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ( ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ )= ‪.(٤٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻢ( ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )= ‪ (٤‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ِ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻮﺍء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ِ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫)= ‪.(٧٦‬‬
‫● ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍء[ )= ‪.(٧٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫]‪] ◄ [ 3‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[0‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺿﻊ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٧٧‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻻ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ[ )= ‪ (١٧٧‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ[ )= ‪.(٧٦‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )= ‪ (١٥٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫● ‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ‪Image Transfer Utility‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )= ‪ (١٥٣‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫● ‪Map Utility‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫● ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ً‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎ ً‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ‪Windows 8/8.1‬‬
‫● ‪Windows 7 SP1‬‬
‫‪١٧٨‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ؛ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،(Mini-B :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) USB‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )‪ .(١‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪.(٢‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(١٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫● ‪Mac OS X 10.9‬‬
‫● ‪Mac OS X 10.8‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“ )= ‪.(١٤٠‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Mac OS z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Windows z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪Downloads Images From Canon‬‬
‫‪/Camera‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ،[Canon‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ‪،CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٧٩‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ً‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎ ً‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫● ‪ :Windows 7‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Dock‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪) RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪.(RAW‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ؛ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ SELPHY CP‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﻫﻨﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ؛ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.(Mini-B :‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) USB‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ“‬
‫)= ‪.(١٦٩‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٨٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ٍ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ‪ ١‬ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١٨١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ً‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٨٠‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ )= ‪.(١٨١‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )= ‪.(١٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“ )= ‪(١٨١‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٧‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ“ )= ‪ (١٨٠‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٨١‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ L‬ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.٣:٢‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٣٠ x ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٨٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(١٨٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‪ ،(l‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“ )= ‪(١٨١‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ )ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ )= ‪ (١٨٥‬ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪.Digital Print Order Format (DPOF‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٨٠‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪4‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[ ﻭ]ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ‪ CP720/CP730‬ﺃﻭ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺯ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ[ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻭ]ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫● ﺳﻴﻤﻨﻌﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫)ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪.(٢١ =) [ 2‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ“ )= ‪،(١٨٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪4‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ“ )= ‪ (١١٧‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٤‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‪ ٩٩‬ﻧﺴﺨﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ“ )= ‪،(١٨٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ“ )= ‪،(١٨٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪4‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪– ١٨٣‬‬
‫= ‪ ،(١٨٤‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻃﺒﻊ ﺍﻵﻥ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٨٥‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٥‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٨٥‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٨٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٨٥‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺆ ﱢﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ )= ‪.(١٩‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )= ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ ً‬
‫● ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )= ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻔﺨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺎﻭﻑ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٨٧‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )= ‪.(١٦٩‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )= ‪.(٢٩‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )= ‪ ،(١٠٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫● ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪.LED‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٩٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٣٨‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٣٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ[ )= ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(٩٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(٨٠ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )= ‪.(٢١٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٥٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.macro‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻭ ‪.(٩٣ = ،٨٩ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٨٨‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(٩٣‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٧٩‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ )= ‪.(٧٩ = ،٧٩‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٧٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ )= ‪.(٧٩ = ،٧٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(٣٨‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ) ‪.(٢١٣‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(١٠١ = ،٩٤‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(٨٠ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(٢١٣‬‬